MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

March 1 2017

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

USPS Marketing Mail Track

March 1 2017

3

reg

USPS Marketing Mail Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Presidentrsquos Day Plant and NDC Conditions

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 168 (MSPlts) and 180 (PPOWG) Update

FSS and FAST

MTE Update

Open Discussion

Agenda

reg

4

Opening Remarks

reg

5

Service Update

reg

6

Marketing Mail

9100

Marketing Mail UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

6

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

7

Marketing Mail DSCF Letters

9100

DSCF Letters UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

7

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

USPS Marketing Mail Track

March 1 2017

3

reg

USPS Marketing Mail Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Presidentrsquos Day Plant and NDC Conditions

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 168 (MSPlts) and 180 (PPOWG) Update

FSS and FAST

MTE Update

Open Discussion

Agenda

reg

4

Opening Remarks

reg

5

Service Update

reg

6

Marketing Mail

9100

Marketing Mail UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

6

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

7

Marketing Mail DSCF Letters

9100

DSCF Letters UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

7

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

3

reg

USPS Marketing Mail Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Presidentrsquos Day Plant and NDC Conditions

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 168 (MSPlts) and 180 (PPOWG) Update

FSS and FAST

MTE Update

Open Discussion

Agenda

reg

4

Opening Remarks

reg

5

Service Update

reg

6

Marketing Mail

9100

Marketing Mail UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

6

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

7

Marketing Mail DSCF Letters

9100

DSCF Letters UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

7

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

4

Opening Remarks

reg

5

Service Update

reg

6

Marketing Mail

9100

Marketing Mail UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

6

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

7

Marketing Mail DSCF Letters

9100

DSCF Letters UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

7

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

5

Service Update

reg

6

Marketing Mail

9100

Marketing Mail UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

6

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

7

Marketing Mail DSCF Letters

9100

DSCF Letters UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

7

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

6

Marketing Mail

9100

Marketing Mail UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

6

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

7

Marketing Mail DSCF Letters

9100

DSCF Letters UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

7

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

7

Marketing Mail DSCF Letters

9100

DSCF Letters UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

7

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

8

Marketing Mail DSCF Flats

9100

DSCF Flats UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

8

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

9

reg

Plant and NDC Conditions

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

10

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

11

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

12

reg

Delivery Discussion

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

13

reg

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

14

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

15

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

16

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

17

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

18

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

19

reg

19

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

20

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

21

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

22

Work Group Updates

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

23

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

24

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

25

Work Group 180

25

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

26

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

27

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

28

FAST

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

29

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

30

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

31

FSS

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

32

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

33

reg

MTE Update

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

34

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

35

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

36

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

37

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

38

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

39

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

40

Open Discussion

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

Periodicals Track

March 1 2017

42

reg Agenda

Periodicals Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Presidentrsquos Day Plant and NDC Conditions

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 168 (MSPlts) and 180 (PPOWG) Update

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation Discussion

FSS and FAST Update

MTE Update

Open Discussion

reg

43

Opening Remarks

reg

44

Service Update

reg

45

Periodicals

9100

Periodicals UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

45

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

46

reg

Post-Presidentrsquos Day

Plant and NDC Conditions

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

Periodicals Track

March 1 2017

42

reg Agenda

Periodicals Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Presidentrsquos Day Plant and NDC Conditions

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 168 (MSPlts) and 180 (PPOWG) Update

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation Discussion

FSS and FAST Update

MTE Update

Open Discussion

reg

43

Opening Remarks

reg

44

Service Update

reg

45

Periodicals

9100

Periodicals UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

45

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

46

reg

Post-Presidentrsquos Day

Plant and NDC Conditions

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

42

reg Agenda

Periodicals Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Presidentrsquos Day Plant and NDC Conditions

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 168 (MSPlts) and 180 (PPOWG) Update

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation Discussion

FSS and FAST Update

MTE Update

Open Discussion

reg

43

Opening Remarks

reg

44

Service Update

reg

45

Periodicals

9100

Periodicals UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

45

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

46

reg

Post-Presidentrsquos Day

Plant and NDC Conditions

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

reg

43

Opening Remarks

reg

44

Service Update

reg

45

Periodicals

9100

Periodicals UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

45

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

46

reg

Post-Presidentrsquos Day

Plant and NDC Conditions

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

reg

44

Service Update

reg

45

Periodicals

9100

Periodicals UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

45

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

46

reg

Post-Presidentrsquos Day

Plant and NDC Conditions

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

reg

45

Periodicals

9100

Periodicals UCLLCL Target SPLY

7000

8000

9000

10000

45

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

46

reg

Post-Presidentrsquos Day

Plant and NDC Conditions

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

46

reg

Post-Presidentrsquos Day

Plant and NDC Conditions

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

47

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Q1 FY 17 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -37 -84 -90

DPDMF to SPLY -486 100 -286

-37 -84 -90

-486

100

-286

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 03 141 -72

DPDMF to SPLY -402 603 -165

03 141

-72

-402

603

-165

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

48

reg

Plant amp NDC Mail Conditions

Presidents Day 21117 ndash 22417 vs SPLY

Source EDWASRWebMCRS NDC Delayed Periodicals and Standard Letters were ldquo0rdquo during SPLY timeframe thus any delayed volume would represent 100 increase

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY -90 -346 -208

DPDMF to SPLY -168 -4755 -1583

-90 -346 -208 -168

-4755

-1583

-600

-500

-400

-300

-200

-100

0

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Periodicals Standard Letters Standard Flats

OH to SPLY 248 -89 -163

DPDMF to SPLY 1000 1000 -131

248

-89 -163

1000 1000

-131 -40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

OH to SPLY DPDMF to SPLY

Plant Conditions vs SPLY

NDC Conditions vs SPLY

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

49

reg

Delivery Discussion

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

50

reg

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

51

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

52

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

53

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

54

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

55

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

56

reg

56

250

350

450

550

650

750

W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20

DU BVScore

SPLY

Bundle Visibility

Q2- Bundle Visibility Score FY 17 vs SPLY

Q2 - Distribution Scan FY 17 vs SPLY Q2- Inventory Complete Scan FY 17 vs SPLY

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

57

reg

Coordinate USPS Efforts

Mail Processing

Post Office Operations

Delivery Operations

Enterprise Analytics

Improve nesting to destinating to Post Office container

rates at plants

APPS

SPBSTS

SPSS

Improve Customer Service and Delivery Operations

scanning and integrity

Improved diagnostics

Bundle Visibility

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

58

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

reg

59

Work Group Update

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

60

Work Group 168

FSS Multi Scheme Pallets

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

61

Work Group 180

Presort amp Prep Optimization

(PPOWG)

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

62

Work Group 180

62

WG180 Issue Statement

USPS and Industry members jointly address key mail

preparation ideas and improvements then prioritize and

identify the most promising high priority innovations

Also the WG will

bull Identify integrated information needs and technical

demands stemming from future changes

bull Find solutions to issues raised in the Mail Prep and

Entry and Flats Ad Hoc committees

WG Leaders

bull Industry Bob Rosser Focus Area Leader Mail Prep Entry and Operations

bull USPS Paul Mitchell AManager Operations Integration and Support

78 WG Members from both

USPS and Industry

12 Topics remaining from

original list of 109

10 Meetings since Oct 4

Kick-Off Call

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

63

WG180 Process

Each topic is reviewed following a set methodology

In three months WG180 prioritized top ldquoQuick Winrdquo issues and

developed recommendations for two full topics

Topic are feasible when change is possible the level of effort required

fits the potential benefit and its in WG180rsquos scope

Concept details are presented in multiple meetings and via email to

clarify the question

Feedback is solicited in multiple ways to maximize members inclusion

homework meeting discussions and live voting

Recommendation memos are shared internally with USPS departments

and with MTAC leadership

Transparency around feedback analysis supports dissenting membersrsquo

participation

Feasibility Criteria

Concept Presentation

Member Feedback

Analysis

Recommendation

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

64

Next Steps

WebEx Topic 1 recommendation development

WebEx Topic 1 introduction

April 11

March 14

WebEx Topic 1 homework results and analysis March 28

Draft Schedule

WebEx Topic 2 additional information from SMEs

WebEx Topic 2 introduction

May 30

April 25

WebEx Topic 2 homework results and analysis May 9

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

reg

65

Periodicals

ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

66

reg ldquoNEWSrdquo Designation

DMM 203412 ldquoNEWSrdquo designation used if

Published weekly or more often (more frequently than weekly) or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 207281 Enter and Deposit ndash Service Objectives

Publications labeled ldquoNEWSrdquo receive newspaper treatment if published weekly or more often or if authorized such treatment as of March 1 1984

DMM 705869 Periodicals Publications

Except as provided in 816 for copalletized mailings Periodicals publications must use one of the following for Line 2 class information

ldquoPERrdquo

ldquoNEWSrdquo if published weekly or more often or if authorized newspaper treatment as of March 1 1984

reg

67

FAST

68

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

69

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

70

FSS

reg

71

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

72

reg

MTE Update

reg

73

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

68

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

69

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

70

FSS

reg

71

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

72

reg

MTE Update

reg

73

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

69

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

reg

70

FSS

reg

71

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

72

reg

MTE Update

reg

73

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

70

FSS

reg

71

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

72

reg

MTE Update

reg

73

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

71

FSS

L006 Label List

Added 243 new zones last Spring but were not

included in L006

Effective January 2017 pricing based on logical presort

New zones added to the Labeling list effective February

1 2017

72

reg

MTE Update

reg

73

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

72

reg

MTE Update

reg

73

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

73

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

74

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

75

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

76

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

77

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

78

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

79

reg

Open Discussion

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

First Class Track

March 1 2017

81

reg

First Class Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 175 (CSA) Update

MTE

Open Discussion

Agenda

reg

82

Opening Remarks

reg

83

Service Update

reg

84

First-Class Composite (LettersFlats)

9600

FCM Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

LettersFlats amp NPA excludes some 5-digit Zips

84

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

85

First-Class Parcels Composite

FCM Parcels Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

9480

85

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

First Class Track

March 1 2017

81

reg

First Class Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 175 (CSA) Update

MTE

Open Discussion

Agenda

reg

82

Opening Remarks

reg

83

Service Update

reg

84

First-Class Composite (LettersFlats)

9600

FCM Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

LettersFlats amp NPA excludes some 5-digit Zips

84

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

85

First-Class Parcels Composite

FCM Parcels Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

9480

85

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

81

reg

First Class Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Delivery Discussion

Work Group 175 (CSA) Update

MTE

Open Discussion

Agenda

reg

82

Opening Remarks

reg

83

Service Update

reg

84

First-Class Composite (LettersFlats)

9600

FCM Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

LettersFlats amp NPA excludes some 5-digit Zips

84

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

85

First-Class Parcels Composite

FCM Parcels Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

9480

85

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

82

Opening Remarks

reg

83

Service Update

reg

84

First-Class Composite (LettersFlats)

9600

FCM Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

LettersFlats amp NPA excludes some 5-digit Zips

84

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

85

First-Class Parcels Composite

FCM Parcels Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

9480

85

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

83

Service Update

reg

84

First-Class Composite (LettersFlats)

9600

FCM Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

LettersFlats amp NPA excludes some 5-digit Zips

84

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

85

First-Class Parcels Composite

FCM Parcels Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

9480

85

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

84

First-Class Composite (LettersFlats)

9600

FCM Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

8000

8500

9000

9500

10000

LettersFlats amp NPA excludes some 5-digit Zips

84

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

85

First-Class Parcels Composite

FCM Parcels Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

9480

85

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

85

First-Class Parcels Composite

FCM Parcels Composite UCLLCL Target SPLY

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

9480

85

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

86

Delivery Discussion

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

87

reg

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

88

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

89

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

90

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

91

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

92

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

93

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

94

Work Group Update

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

95

Work Group 175

Streamlining CustomerSupplier

Agreements (CSA) Mail Preparation

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

96

Work Group Mission Statement This workgroup will

identify an approach to automate First-Class Mail container

preparation from being based on CSAs to using software

driven by labeling lists and the DMM

Desired Results

Define set of software labeling lists and business rules to

automate First-Class container preparation

Develop a plan to automate the ability to control the numbers of

separations based on the capabilities of an individual mailersrsquo

facility

Define a plan for pilot testing and establish a schedule for

industry migration

Originally Expected Date of Completion May 31 2016

WG 175 Mission

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

97

WG 175 Status Update

Final Recommendation

Reviewed final recommendation with WG all hands 2102017

Made revisions per WG feedback

Work Group Submitted Final Recommendation to Focus Area

Leadership team 02132017

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

98

reg

MTE Update

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

99

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

100

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

101

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

102

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

103

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

104

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

105

reg

Open Discussion

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

Packages Track

March 1 2017

107

reg Agenda

Packages Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Delivery Discussion

FAST Update

MTE Update

Open Discussion

reg

108

Opening Remarks

reg

109

Service Update

reg

110

Parcel Select

9970

Parcel Select UCLLCL Target SPLY

9900

9925

9950

9975

10000

110

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

111

reg

Delivery Discussion

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

MTAC

Mail Prep amp Entry Focus Group

Packages Track

March 1 2017

107

reg Agenda

Packages Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Delivery Discussion

FAST Update

MTE Update

Open Discussion

reg

108

Opening Remarks

reg

109

Service Update

reg

110

Parcel Select

9970

Parcel Select UCLLCL Target SPLY

9900

9925

9950

9975

10000

110

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

111

reg

Delivery Discussion

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

107

reg Agenda

Packages Track Opening Remarks

Service Visualization

Delivery Discussion

FAST Update

MTE Update

Open Discussion

reg

108

Opening Remarks

reg

109

Service Update

reg

110

Parcel Select

9970

Parcel Select UCLLCL Target SPLY

9900

9925

9950

9975

10000

110

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

111

reg

Delivery Discussion

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

108

Opening Remarks

reg

109

Service Update

reg

110

Parcel Select

9970

Parcel Select UCLLCL Target SPLY

9900

9925

9950

9975

10000

110

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

111

reg

Delivery Discussion

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

109

Service Update

reg

110

Parcel Select

9970

Parcel Select UCLLCL Target SPLY

9900

9925

9950

9975

10000

110

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

111

reg

Delivery Discussion

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

110

Parcel Select

9970

Parcel Select UCLLCL Target SPLY

9900

9925

9950

9975

10000

110

QTR 1

Actual

SPLY Var

Q2TD thru December 31 2016

111

reg

Delivery Discussion

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

111

reg

Delivery Discussion

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

112

reg

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

113

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

15 increase package to SPLY

Package conveyance capacity

Loading

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

114

reg PEAK Challenges - Carriers

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

115

reg Service Performance Measurement

Exploring potential of SV from the collection box to post office (first

mile)

Improve DPS quality and quality reporting

Missent Missort Missequence

Reduce Misdelivery

FIRST MILE

LAST MILE

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

116

reg Service Performance Measurement

Collection Delivery

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

117

reg Service Performance Measurement

Randomizing SPM Count based as pieces run through automation

Higher piece counts capture higher sizeshape variation

Address type rate and presort are not used

Repeat use of individual carrier routes are limited

Targeted Samplings

Delivery unit or route specific sampling requests for Operational Visibility under consideration

Can currently see low performing ZIPs and Routes (last mile)

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

118

reg Misdelivery - Quality

Daily PUSH reporting ndash Misdelivery complaints to

AreaDistrict and Office level

Videorsquos and Stand Up talks issued to field linking the

Customer Experience to DeliveryScanning accuracy

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

119

reg Delivery Survey

Delivery FY16

FY17

YTD

Pcnt

Diff

Overall

Satisfaction7627 7944 42

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

120

reg Business Closed amp UAA Delivered

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

121

reg

IV Mail Tracking amp Reporting Logical Delivery Events

Inventory and Trigger Criteria for Logical Delivery Events

Delivery Scenario Inventory Criteria

Trigger Criteria and Time

Used for Logical Delivery

Event

On-street Mailpiece received processing scan with

one of the following opcodes 146 538

918 or 919

OR

Has an ldquoOut for Deliveryrdquo event

(Note This event will not be available until

Release 21)

Carrier device enters geofence

on the Anticipated Delivery Date

(ADD) for the associated ZIP+4

PO Box PO Box uptime barcode is

scanned on the ADD for the

associated Post Office

Caller Service (Delivery

Unit) Opening time of Post Office on

the ADD

Criteria for creating Logical Delivery Events

The table below describes the criteria IV uses to add a mailpiece to

inventory for delivery based on the last expected processing operation

as well as the trigger criteria and time used for the logical delivery

event The criteria differ based on the type of delivery

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

122

reg

FAST Update

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

123

reg

What are the new FAST appointment business rules

FAST Appointment Enhancement

Released September 25

UpdateCancel Appointments as you normally do from appointment creation up to 1 hour before original appointment time

CreateUpdateCancel Appointments

Original Appt Time

24 hrs after

1 hr before

Schedule Appt

ldquoLate Reschedulerdquo Appointments

1 Late reschedule 1 hr before original appt and up to 24 hrs after original appt time

2 1 late reschedule per appt 3 New appointment must be win 72 hrs of the

original appt 4 Appt marked as ldquoLate Rescheduledrdquo (impacts carrier

rating) 5 No Show if no late reschedule amp driver doesnrsquot show

up win 24 hrs for original appt 6 Mailer keeps original appt

Clarification Late Reschedule window is 1 hour prior to original appointment and up to 24 hrs after the original appointment time

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

124

reg Communicating New Arrival Process

bull USPS re-distributed procedure to plant

personnel along with Instructions on

where to place the Posters

bull Posters to be placed strategically

on doors where drivers Enter amp

Exit

bull Expeditor instructed to hand a

flyer to any driver that checks

in at same time as backing to

dock

bull USPS Operations will be tracking

Compliance

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

125

reg

MTE Update

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

126

MTEOR Update

Modified Internal Dashboard display

Order Number Dispatch Date Dispatch Time Trip No

Route No Status Date Placed User

New order status ndash Ready for Delivery for local mailers

Plants will use ldquoReady for Deliveryrdquo if being delivered

ldquoReady for Pick-uprdquo status for mailer pick-ups

Plastic Pallets

For local mailers

Order for pallets can now be made in pieces

Label Holders

Increased box orders to 80 max per order

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

127

Weekly Mailer Orders at MTESCs

Nov ndash 717

Dec ndash 203

Jan ndash 053

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

128

PQ 2 Purchase Plan

43M pieces of MTE ordered for PQ 2 of FY17

Quantities are provided in pieces - Deliveries continue through March 31 2017

Green shading indicates receipts as of January 31 2017

MTE Type October November December Total

Pallets 236250 182250 106650 525150

EMM Trays 215040 0 0 215040

Half Trays 0 0 0 0

MM Trays 240240 120120 0 360360

EMM Sleeves 252000 364000 364000 980000

Half Sleeves 0 0 0 0

MM Sleeves 641250 472500 0 1113750

Flat Tubs 100800 201600 0 302400

1 Sacks 300000 200000 300000 800000

Total 1985580 1540470 770650 4296700

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

129

MTE Inventory Status

As of

022717

Current

MTESC

On-Hand

Inventory

1-Week

Safety

Inventory

Pieces

+-

Safety

Level

Percent

+-

Safety

Level

Demand

vs

SPLY

Inventory

vs

SPLY

Pallets 1200195 500000 700195 140 23 -8

EMM Trays 5846592 2000000 3846592 192 -7 46

Half Trays 3521910 1500000 2021910 135 0 194

MM Trays 6759690 3250000 3509690 108 3 152

EMM Sleeves 5146848 2500000 2646848 106 2 -8

Half Sleeves 8116122 1750000 6366122 364 5 426

MM Sleeves 4263870 4500000 -236130 -5 5 81

Flat Tubs 4502288 750000 3752288 500 0 14

1 Sacks 3335500 1500000 1835500 122 9 -8

Source MTESS

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

130

Inventory

MTEOR requirement

Weekly input of unused MTE

Does not include supplies in use on production floor

Also required of Postal Plants

Usage of Inventory Data

Predict supply needs

Track MTE usage

Plan for equipment transfers

Identify potential ordering issues

Reminders are displayed on dashboard

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

131

MTEOR weekly inventory

Order trays amp sleeves in like quantities (pieces not pallets)

Refer to graphics at

httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=industryoutreach

or httpsribbsuspsgovindexcfmpage=mteor

Continue to place equipment orders just-in-time based on

production

Contact your BSN to return MTE excess to your needs

Contact MTEOR helpdesk for order issues

(866) 330-3404 or MTEORuspsgov

How Industry Partners Can Help

Keep MTE Circulating

reg

132

Open Discussion